blob: 00e2e9909d45051f597f9c4f6298cd3af745381e [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02009 * Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070010 *
11 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14 */
15
16#ifndef MAC80211_H
17#define MAC80211_H
18
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050019#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/kernel.h>
21#include <linux/if_ether.h>
22#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020025#include <net/codel.h>
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +030026#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020027#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070028
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040029/**
30 * DOC: Introduction
31 *
32 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
33 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
34 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
35 * drivers.
36 */
37
38/**
39 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
40 *
41 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070042 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
43 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
44 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010045 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
46 * tasklet function.
47 *
48 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070049 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 */
51
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052/**
53 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070054 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040055 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
56 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
57 */
58
59/**
60 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070061 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040062 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
63 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
64 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
65 * hardware.
66 *
67 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
68 *
69 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
70 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
71 *
72 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
73 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070074 */
75
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020076/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040077 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
78 *
79 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
80 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
81 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
82 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
83 *
84 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
85 * suspend.
86 *
87 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
88 *
89 */
90
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010091/**
92 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
93 *
94 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
95 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
96 * between different stations/interfaces.
97 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
98 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
99 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
100 *
101 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
102 * driver operation.
103 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +0300104 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
105 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
106 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100107 *
108 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
109 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
110 *
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +0100111 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
112 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
113 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100114 *
115 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
116 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
117 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
118 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
119 * .release_buffered_frames().
120 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
121 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
122 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
123 */
124
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500125struct device;
126
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400127/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
129 *
130 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132 */
133enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100135 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136};
137
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200138#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
139
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200140/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800141 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
143 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
144 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
146 */
147enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
148 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
149 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
150 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
151 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
152};
153
154/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
156 *
157 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100158 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400160 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200161 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
162 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100164 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300165 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200166 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300167 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
168 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400169 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700170struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200171 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100172 u16 cw_min;
173 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200174 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300175 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200176 bool uapsd;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300177 bool mu_edca;
178 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700179};
180
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700181struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
182 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
183 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
184 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
185 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
186};
187
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100188/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
194 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196 */
197enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100198 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200199 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100200 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200203};
204
205/**
206 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
207 *
208 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
209 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
210 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100211 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200212 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200213 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
214 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
215 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
216 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100217 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100218 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
220 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
221 */
222struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100223 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200224 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200226 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
227
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100228 bool radar_enabled;
229
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100230 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200231};
232
233/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300234 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
235 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
236 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
237 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
239 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
240 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
241 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
242 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
243 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
244 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
245 * for changes/removal.)
246 */
247enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
248 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
249 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
250};
251
252/**
253 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
254 *
255 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
256 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
257 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
258 * done.
259 *
260 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
261 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
262 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
263 */
264struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
266 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
267 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
268};
269
270/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100271 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
272 *
273 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
274 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
275 *
276 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
277 * also implies a change in the AID.
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300280 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700281 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
285 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
287 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
288 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
289 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
294 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200295 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200296 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200297 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300298 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200299 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200301 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300302 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
303 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100304 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
305 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
306 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100307 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200308 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300309 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
310 * keep alive) changed.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
312 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100313 */
314enum ieee80211_bss_change {
315 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
316 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
317 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300318 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
323 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200325 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200326 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300327 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200328 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200329 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300330 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200331 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300332 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200333 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100334 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100336 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100337 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200338 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300339 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700340 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200341
342 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100343};
344
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300345/*
346 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
347 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
348 * filtering will be disabled.
349 */
350#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
351
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100352/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
354 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200355 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300356 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300357 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
358 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
359 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700360 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200361enum ieee80211_event_type {
362 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200363 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300364 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300365 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200366};
367
368/**
369 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
370 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
371 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
372 */
373enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700374 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
375 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
376};
377
378/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200379 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200380 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
381 */
382struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
383 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
384};
385
386/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200387 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
388 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200389 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200390 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
391 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
394 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200395 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200396 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
397 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200398};
399
400/**
401 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
402 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
403 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
404 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
405 */
406enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
407 MLME_SUCCESS,
408 MLME_DENIED,
409 MLME_TIMEOUT,
410};
411
412/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200413 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200414 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
415 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
416 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
417 */
418struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
419 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
420 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
421 u16 reason;
422};
423
424/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300425 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
426 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
427 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 */
430struct ieee80211_ba_event {
431 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
432 u16 tid;
433 u16 ssn;
434};
435
436/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200438 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200439 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200440 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300441 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300442 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200443 */
444struct ieee80211_event {
445 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
446 union {
447 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200448 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300449 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200450 } u;
451};
452
453/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200454 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
455 *
456 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
457 *
458 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
459 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
460 */
461struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
462 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
463 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
464};
465
466/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100467 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
468 *
469 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
470 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
471 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300472 * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
473 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
474 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
475 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
476 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
477 * ACK, BACK or both
478 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
479 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
480 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100481 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200482 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
483 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530484 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100485 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
486 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200487 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
488 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100489 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200490 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300491 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200492 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100493 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
494 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
495 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
496 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200497 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200498 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
499 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200500 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100501 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
502 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200503 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
504 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
505 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700506 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800507 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200508 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
509 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
510 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300511 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100512 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200513 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
514 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100515 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
516 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200517 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100518 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300519 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
520 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
521 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200522 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200523 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
524 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
525 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100526 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
527 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
528 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
529 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200530 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300531 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
532 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
533 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
534 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100535 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
536 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
537 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200538 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200539 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
540 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
541 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300542 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
543 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200544 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300545 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
546 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200547 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100548 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
549 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
550 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
551 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
552 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
553 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100554 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200555 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
556 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
557 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300558 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
559 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
560 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
561 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
562 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
563 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
564 * station.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100565 */
566struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200567 const u8 *bssid;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300568 u8 bss_color;
569 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
570 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
571 bool uora_exists;
572 bool ack_enabled;
573 u8 uora_ocw_range;
574 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
575 bool he_support;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100576 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200577 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530578 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100579 u16 aid;
580 /* erp related data */
581 bool use_cts_prot;
582 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300583 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200584 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800585 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700586 u16 beacon_int;
587 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200588 u64 sync_tsf;
589 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100590 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100591 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300592 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200593 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200594 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200595 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
596 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100597 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
598 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100599 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200600 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300601 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100602 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200603 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200604 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300605 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300606 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
607 size_t ssid_len;
608 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200609 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100610 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100611 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200612 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300613 u16 max_idle_period;
614 bool protected_keep_alive;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100615};
616
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800617/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200618 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800619 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700620 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800621 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100622 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200623 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
624 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
625 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
626 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
627 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
628 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
629 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
630 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
631 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
632 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
633 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200634 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200635 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
636 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200637 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200638 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
639 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200641 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200642 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
643 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
644 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
645 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
646 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
647 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
648 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
649 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200650 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
651 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
652 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300653 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
654 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200655 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
656 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
657 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600658 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
659 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
660 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100661 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
662 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
663 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200664 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
665 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200666 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
667 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100668 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
669 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
670 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200671 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
672 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
673 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
674 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100675 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
676 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
677 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100678 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
679 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
680 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200681 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
682 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
683 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400684 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200685 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
686 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100687 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
688 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
689 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
690 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200691 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
692 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
693 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
695 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
696 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200697 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
698 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
699 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200700 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
701 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530702 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
703 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
704 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200705 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
706 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
707 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530708 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
709 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
710 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
711 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
712 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200713 *
714 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
715 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800716 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200717enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200718 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200719 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
720 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
721 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
722 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
723 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
724 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
725 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
726 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
727 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
728 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
729 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
730 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600731 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100732 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200733 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200734 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100735 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200736 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100737 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100738 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200739 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100742 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200743 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530744 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530746 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200747 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530748 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200749};
750
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200751#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
752
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200753/**
754 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
755 *
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
757 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530758 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
759 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100760 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100761 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200762 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200763 *
764 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
765 */
766enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
767 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530768 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100769 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100770 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200771 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200772};
773
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200774/*
775 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
776 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
777 */
778#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
779 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
780 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
781 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
782 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100783 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200784 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200785 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200786
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530787/**
788 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
789 * Rate Control algorithm.
790 *
791 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
792 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
793 *
794 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
795 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
796 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
797 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
798 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100799 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
800 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530801 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
802 * Greenfield mode.
803 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100804 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
805 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
806 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530807 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
808 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
809 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
810 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
811 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200812enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
813 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
814 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
815 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
816
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100817 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200818 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
819 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
820 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
821 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
822 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100823 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
824 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
825 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800826};
827
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200828
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200829/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
830#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200831
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200832/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
833#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
834
835/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200836#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200837
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200838/* maximum number of rate table entries */
839#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
840
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200841/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200842 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200843 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200844 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
845 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200846 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200847 *
848 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
849 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
850 *
851 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
852 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200853 *
854 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
855 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
856 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
857 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300858 * information::
859 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200860 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300861 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200862 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
863 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
864 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
865 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300866 * information should then contain::
867 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200868 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300869 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200870 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
871 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200872 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200873struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
874 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100875 u16 count:5,
876 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000877} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200878
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100879#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
880
881static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
882 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
883{
884 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200885 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
886 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100887}
888
889static inline u8
890ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
891{
892 return rate->idx & 0xF;
893}
894
895static inline u8
896ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
897{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200898 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100899}
900
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200901/**
902 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200903 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200904 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
905 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
906 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
907 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
908 *
909 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200910 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200911 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100912 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700913 * @control: union for control data
914 * @status: union for status data
915 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100916 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700917 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100918 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700919 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200920 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200921 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200922struct ieee80211_tx_info {
923 /* common information */
924 u32 flags;
925 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200926
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200927 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100928
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100929 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100930
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200931 union {
932 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200933 union {
934 /* rate control */
935 struct {
936 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
937 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
938 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200939 u8 use_rts:1;
940 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200941 u8 short_preamble:1;
942 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200943 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200944 };
945 /* only needed before rate control */
946 unsigned long jiffies;
947 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200948 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200950 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200951 u32 flags;
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200952 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200953 } control;
954 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200955 u64 cookie;
956 } ack;
957 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200958 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200959 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200960 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100961 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200962 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300963 u16 tx_time;
Venkateswara Naralasettya78b26f2018-02-13 11:04:46 +0530964 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300965 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200966 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200967 struct {
968 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
969 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200970 u8 pad[4];
971
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200972 void *rate_driver_data[
973 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
974 };
975 void *driver_data[
976 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200977 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700978};
979
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300980/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +0200981 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
982 *
983 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
984 * @info: Basic tx status information
985 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
986 */
987struct ieee80211_tx_status {
988 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
989 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
990 struct sk_buff *skb;
991};
992
993/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200994 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
995 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200996 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
997 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
998 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200999 *
1000 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1001 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1002 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1003 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1004 */
1005struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001006 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1007 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001008 const u8 *common_ies;
1009 size_t common_ie_len;
1010};
1011
1012
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001013static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1014{
1015 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1016}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001017
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001018static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1019{
1020 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1021}
1022
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001023/**
1024 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1025 *
1026 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1027 *
1028 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1029 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1030 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1031 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1032 *
1033 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1034 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1035 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1036 */
1037static inline void
1038ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1039{
1040 int i;
1041
1042 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1043 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1044 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1045 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1046 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1047 /* clear the rate counts */
1048 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1049 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1050
1051 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001052 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001053 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1054 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1055 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1056}
1057
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001058
1059/**
1060 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1061 *
1062 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1063 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1064 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1065 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001066 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1067 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001068 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001069 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1070 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001071 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1072 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1073 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1074 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001075 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1076 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001077 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1078 * the frame.
1079 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1080 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001081 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001082 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1083 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1084 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001085 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1086 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1087 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001088 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1089 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001090 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1091 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001092 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1093 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1094 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001095 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1096 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1097 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1098 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1099 * on this subframe
1100 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1101 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001102 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1103 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001104 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1105 * processing it in any regular way.
1106 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1107 * them for sniffing purposes.
1108 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1109 * monitor interfaces.
1110 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1111 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001112 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1113 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1114 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1115 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1116 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1117 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1118 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1119 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1120 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001121 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1122 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1123 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001124 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1125 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1126 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001127 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1128 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001129 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1130 * frame
1131 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001132 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1133 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1134 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1135 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1136 * - DATA3_CODING
1137 * - DATA5_GI
1138 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1139 * - DATA6_NSTS
1140 * - DATA3_STBC
1141 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1142 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1143 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001144 */
1145enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001146 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1147 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001148 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001149 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1150 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1151 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1152 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001153 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001154 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1155 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1156 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1157 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1158 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1159 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1160 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1161 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1162 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1163 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1164 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1165 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1166 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1167 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1168 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1169 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001170 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1171 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001172 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1173 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001174};
1175
1176/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001177 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001178 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001179 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001180 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1181 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1182 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1183 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1184 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1185 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1186 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001187 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001188 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001189enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1190 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001191 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1192 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1193 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1194 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1195 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001196};
1197
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001198#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1199
1200enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1201 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1202 RX_ENC_HT,
1203 RX_ENC_VHT,
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001204 RX_ENC_HE,
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001205};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001206
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001207/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001208 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1209 *
1210 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1211 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001212 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001213 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001214 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1215 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001216 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1217 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001218 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1219 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001220 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001221 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001222 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1223 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001224 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1225 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001227 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1228 * values were filled.
1229 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1230 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001231 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001232 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001233 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001234 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001235 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001236 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1237 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001238 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001239 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1240 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1241 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001242 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001243 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1244 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1245 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001246 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001247struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1248 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001249 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001250 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001251 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001252 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001253 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001254 u8 enc_flags;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001255 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1256 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001257 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001258 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001259 u8 rx_flags;
1260 u8 band;
1261 u8 antenna;
1262 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001263 u8 chains;
1264 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001265 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001266};
1267
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001268/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001269 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1270 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1271 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1272 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1273 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1274 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1275 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1276 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1277 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1278 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1279 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1280 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1281 * @data field.
1282 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1283 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1284 * length
1285 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1286 *
1287 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1288 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1289 * data.
1290 */
1291struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1292 u32 present;
1293 u8 align;
1294 u8 oui[3];
1295 u8 subns;
1296 u8 pad;
1297 u16 len;
1298 u8 data[];
1299} __packed;
1300
1301/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001302 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1303 *
1304 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1305 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001306 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1307 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1308 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001309 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1310 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1311 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1312 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1313 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1314 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1315 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001316 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1317 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1318 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1319 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1320 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001321 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1322 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001323 */
1324enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001325 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001326 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001327 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001328 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001329};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001330
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001331
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001332/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001333 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1334 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001335 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001336 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001337 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001338 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001339 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001340 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001341 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001342 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001343 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1344 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001345 */
1346enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001347 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001348 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001349 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001350 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001351 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1352 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1353 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001354 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001355};
1356
1357/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001358 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1359 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001360 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1361 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1362 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1363 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1364 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001365 */
1366enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1367 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1368 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1369 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1370 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1371
1372 /* keep last */
1373 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1374};
1375
1376/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001377 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1378 *
1379 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1380 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001381 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1382 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001383 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001384 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1385 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1386 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001387 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1388 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1389 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1390 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001391 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1392 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001393 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001394 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001395 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001396 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001397 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001398 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1399 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001400 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001401 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1402 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001403 *
1404 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1405 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001406 * configured for an HT channel.
1407 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1408 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001409 */
1410struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001411 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001412 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001413
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001414 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001415 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001416
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001417 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1418
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001419 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001420 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001421 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001422};
1423
1424/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001425 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1426 *
1427 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1428 * operation.
1429 *
1430 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1431 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1432 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1433 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001434 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1435 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001436 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1437 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001438 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001439 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1440 */
1441struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1442 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001443 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001444 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001445 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001446 u8 count;
1447};
1448
1449/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001450 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1451 *
1452 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1453 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001454 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1455 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1456 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1457 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001458 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1459 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1460 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1461 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001462 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1463 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1464 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001465 */
1466enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1467 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001468 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001469 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001470 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001471};
1472
1473/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001474 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1475 *
1476 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1477 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1478 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001479 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001480 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1481 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001482 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001483 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1484 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001485 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1486 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1487 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001488 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001489 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1490 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1491 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1492 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001493 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1494 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001495 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1496 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1497 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1498 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1499 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001500 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001501 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001502 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001503 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1504 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001505 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001506 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001507 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301508 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1509 * protected by fq->lock.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001510 */
1511struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001512 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001513 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001514 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001515 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001516 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001517 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001518
1519 u8 cab_queue;
1520 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1521
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001522 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1523
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001524 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1525
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001526 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001527
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001528#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1529 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1530#endif
1531
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001532 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1533
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301534 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1535
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001536 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001537 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001538};
1539
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001540static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1541{
1542#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001543 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001544#endif
1545 return false;
1546}
1547
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001548/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001549 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1550 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1551 *
1552 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1553 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1554 *
1555 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1556 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1557 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1558 */
1559struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1560
1561/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001562 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1563 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1564 *
1565 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1566 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1567 *
1568 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1569 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1570 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1571 */
1572struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1573
1574/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001575 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1576 *
1577 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1578 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1579 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001580 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1581 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001582 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1583 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001584 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1585 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1586 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001587 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1588 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001589 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001590 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1591 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001592 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001593 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001594 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001595 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1596 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1597 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001598 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1599 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1600 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1601 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1602 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1603 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1604 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001605 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001606 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001607 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001608 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1609 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1610 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001611 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1612 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1613 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001614 */
1615enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001616 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1617 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1618 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1619 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1620 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1621 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1622 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001623 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001624 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001625};
1626
1627/**
1628 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1629 *
1630 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1631 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1632 *
1633 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1634 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001635 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001636 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001637 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1638 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001639 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1640 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1641 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001642 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1643 * data block:
1644 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1645 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1646 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001647 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1648 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001649 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001650struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001651 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001652 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001653 u8 icv_len;
1654 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001655 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001656 s8 keyidx;
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001657 u16 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001658 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001659 u8 key[0];
1660};
1661
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001662#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1663
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001664#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1665#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1666
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001667/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001668 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1669 *
1670 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1671 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1672 * reverse order than in packet)
1673 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1674 * reverse order than in packet)
1675 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1676 * reverse order than in packet)
1677 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1678 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001679 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001680 */
1681struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1682 union {
1683 struct {
1684 u32 iv32;
1685 u16 iv16;
1686 } tkip;
1687 struct {
1688 u8 pn[6];
1689 } ccmp;
1690 struct {
1691 u8 pn[6];
1692 } aes_cmac;
1693 struct {
1694 u8 pn[6];
1695 } aes_gmac;
1696 struct {
1697 u8 pn[6];
1698 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001699 struct {
1700 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1701 u8 seq_len;
1702 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001703 };
1704};
1705
1706/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001707 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1708 *
1709 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1710 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1711 *
1712 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1713 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1714 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1715 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1716 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1717 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1718 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1719 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1720 * key_idx value calculation:
1721 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1722 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1723 */
1724struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1725 u32 cipher;
1726 u16 iftype;
1727 u8 hdr_len;
1728 u8 pn_len;
1729 u8 pn_off;
1730 u8 key_idx_off;
1731 u8 key_idx_mask;
1732 u8 key_idx_shift;
1733 u8 mic_len;
1734};
1735
1736/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001737 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1738 *
1739 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1740 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1741 *
1742 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1743 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1744 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001745enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001746 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001747};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001748
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001749/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001750 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1751 *
1752 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1753 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1754 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1755 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1756 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1757 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1758 */
1759enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1760 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1761 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1762 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1763 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1764 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1765 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1766};
1767
1768/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001769 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1770 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1771 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1772 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1773 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1774 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1775 *
1776 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1777 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1778 */
1779enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1780 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1781 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1782 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1783 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1784};
1785
1786/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001787 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1788 *
1789 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001790 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001791 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1792 */
1793struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1794 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1795 struct {
1796 s8 idx;
1797 u8 count;
1798 u8 count_cts;
1799 u8 count_rts;
1800 u16 flags;
1801 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1802};
1803
1804/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001805 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1806 *
1807 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1808 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1809 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1810 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1811 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001812 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001813 *
1814 * @addr: MAC address
1815 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001816 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001817 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1818 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001819 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001820 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1821 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1822 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001823 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1824 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001825 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001826 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001827 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001828 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1829 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001830 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001831 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001832 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1833 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1834 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1835 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001836 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001837 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001838 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001839 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1840 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301841 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001842 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1843 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1844 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001845 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001846 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001847 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1848 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001849 */
1850struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001851 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001852 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1853 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001854 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001855 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001856 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1857 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001858 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001859 u8 uapsd_queues;
1860 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001861 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001862 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001863 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001864 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001865 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001866 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301867 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001868 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001869
1870 /**
1871 * @max_amsdu_len:
1872 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1873 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1874 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1875 *
1876 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1877 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1878 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1879 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1880 *
1881 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1882 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1883 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1884 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001885 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001886 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001887 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001888
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001889 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001890
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001891 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001892 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001893};
1894
1895/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001896 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1897 *
1898 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301899 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001900 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001901 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1902 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1903 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001904enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001905 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1906};
1907
1908/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001909 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1910 *
1911 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1912 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1913 */
1914struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1915 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1916};
1917
1918/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001919 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1920 *
1921 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1922 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001923 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
1924 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001925 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001926 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001927 *
1928 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1929 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1930 */
1931struct ieee80211_txq {
1932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1933 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1934 u8 tid;
1935 u8 ac;
1936
1937 /* must be last */
1938 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1939};
1940
1941/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001942 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1943 *
1944 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1945 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1946 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1947 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1948 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1949 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001950 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1951 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1952 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1953 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1954 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1955 * algorithm.
1956 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1957 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1958 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1959 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1960 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1961 * CCK frames.
1962 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001963 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1964 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1965 * the FCS at the end.
1966 *
1967 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1968 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1969 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1970 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1971 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1972 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001973 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001974 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001975 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1976 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1977 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1978 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1979 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001980 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1981 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1982 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1983 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1984 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001985 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1986 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1987 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301988 *
1989 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1990 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001991 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001992 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1993 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1994 *
1995 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1996 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1997 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1998 *
1999 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2000 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02002001 *
2002 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2003 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002004 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05302005 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2006 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2007 * the stack.
2008 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02002009 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002010 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2011 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02002012 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02002013 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2014 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2015 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02002016 *
2017 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2018 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2019 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2020 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2021 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2022 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002023 *
2024 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2025 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2026 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2027 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2028 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2029 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03002030 *
2031 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2032 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2033 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02002034 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02002035 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2036 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2037 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002038 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07002039 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2040 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2041 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2042 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002043 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2044 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2045 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2046 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2047 * supported cipher suites.
2048 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01002049 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2050 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2051 * for frames.
2052 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002053 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2054 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2055 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2056 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002057 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02002058 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2059 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2060 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002061 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2062 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2063 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002064 *
2065 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2066 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002067 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002068 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2069 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2070 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2071 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002072 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2073 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2074 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2075 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002076 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002077 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2078 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2079 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002080 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002081 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002082 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002083 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2084 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2085 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002086 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2087 * within A-MPDU.
2088 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002089 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2090 * for sent beacons.
2091 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002092 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2093 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2094 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2095 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2096 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002097 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2098 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2099 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2100 * timeout.
2101 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002102 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2103 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2104 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002105 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2106 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2107 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2108 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2109 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2110 *
2111 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2112 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2113 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302114 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2115 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2116 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2117 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2118 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002119 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2120 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2121 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2122 *
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002123 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2124 * TDLS links.
2125 *
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002126 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2127 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2128 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2129 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2130 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2131 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2132 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
Randy Dunlapd1361b32018-04-26 18:17:31 -07002133 *
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002134 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2135 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002136 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002137 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2138 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2139 *
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03002140 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2141 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2142 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2143 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2144 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2145 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002146 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002147 */
2148enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002149 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2150 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2151 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2152 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2153 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2154 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2155 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2156 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2157 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2158 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2159 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2160 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2161 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2162 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2163 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2164 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2165 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2166 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2167 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2168 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2169 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2170 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2171 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2172 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2173 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2174 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2175 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2176 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2177 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002178 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002179 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002180 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002181 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002182 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002183 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002184 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2185 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302186 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002187 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002188 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002189 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002190 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002191 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03002192 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002193
2194 /* keep last, obviously */
2195 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002196};
2197
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002198/**
2199 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002200 *
2201 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2202 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2203 *
2204 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2205 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2206 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002207 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2208 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002209 *
2210 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2211 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002212 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2213 * along with this structure.
2214 *
2215 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2216 *
2217 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2218 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2219 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002220 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2221 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002222 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002223 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002224 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002225 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002226 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002227 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002228 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002229 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002230 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2231 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2232 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002233 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2234 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2235 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002236 *
2237 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2238 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002239 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2240 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002241 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2242 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002243 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2244 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002245 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002246 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2247 * can handle.
2248 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2249 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002250 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002251 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002252 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2253 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2254 * aggregation.
2255 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2256 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2257 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002258 *
2259 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002260 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2261 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2262 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2263 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2264 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002265 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002266 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2267 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2268 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002269 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2270 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002271 *
2272 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2273 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002274 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002275 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002276 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002277 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2278 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002279 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002280 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002281 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2282 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002283 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2284 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2285 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2286 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2287 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2288 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2289 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2290 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002291 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002292 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2293 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002294 *
2295 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2296 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2297 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2298 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2299 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2300 * neither enabled.
2301 *
2302 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2303 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2304 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002305 *
2306 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2307 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2308 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002309 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2310 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002311 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002312struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002313 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002314 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002315 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002316 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002317 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002318 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002319 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002320 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002321 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002322 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002323 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002324 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002325 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002326 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002327 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002328 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002329 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002330 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2331 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002332 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002333 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002334 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002335 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002336 struct {
2337 int units_pos;
2338 s16 accuracy;
2339 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002340 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002341 u8 uapsd_queues;
2342 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002343 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2344 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002345 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002346};
2347
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002348static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2349 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2350{
2351 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2352}
2353#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2354
2355static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2356 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2357{
2358 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2359}
2360#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2361
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002362/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002363 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2364 *
2365 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2366 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2367 */
2368struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2369 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2370
2371 /* Keep last */
2372 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2373};
2374
2375/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002376 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2377 *
2378 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2379 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2380 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2381 * @status: channel-switch response status
2382 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2383 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2384 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2385 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2386 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2387 */
2388struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2389 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2390 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2391 u8 action_code;
2392 u32 status;
2393 u32 timestamp;
2394 u16 switch_time;
2395 u16 switch_timeout;
2396 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2397 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2398};
2399
2400/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002401 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2402 *
2403 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2404 *
2405 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2406 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2407 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2408 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2409 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002410 *
2411 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002412 */
2413struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2414
2415/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002416 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2417 *
2418 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2419 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2420 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002421static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2422{
2423 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2424}
2425
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002426/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002427 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002428 *
2429 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2430 * @addr: the address to set
2431 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002432static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002433{
2434 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2435}
2436
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002437static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2438ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002439 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002440{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002441 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002442 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002443 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002444}
2445
2446static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2447ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002448 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002449{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002450 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002451 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002452 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002453}
2454
2455static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2456ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002457 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002458{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002459 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002460 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002461 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002462}
2463
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002464/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002465 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2466 * @hw: the hardware
2467 * @skb: the skb
2468 *
2469 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2470 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2471 */
2472void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2473
2474/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002475 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002476 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002477 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2478 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2479 *
2480 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2481 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002482 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2483 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2484 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002485 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2486 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2487 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002488 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2489 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2490 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2491 *
2492 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2493 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2494 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2495 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2496 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002497 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2498 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2499 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2500 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2501 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002502 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2503 *
2504 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2505 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2506 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2507 * based on the receive flags.
2508 *
2509 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2510 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2511 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2512 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002513 *
2514 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2515 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2516 * handler.
2517 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002518 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002519 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2520 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002521 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002522 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002523 *
2524 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2525 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2526 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002527 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002528
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002529/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002530 * DOC: Powersave support
2531 *
2532 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2533 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002534 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2535 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2536 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2537 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2538 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2539 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2540 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2541 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002542 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002543 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2544 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2545 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002546 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2547 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002548 *
2549 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2550 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2551 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002552 *
2553 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2554 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2555 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2556 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002557 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2558 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002559 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002560 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002561 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2562 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2563 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2564 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2565 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2566 * periods.
2567 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002568 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002569 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2570 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2571 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2572 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2573 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2574 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2575 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2576 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2577 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2578 *
2579 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002580 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002581 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002582 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2583 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2584 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2585 *
2586 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2587 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002588 */
2589
2590/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002591 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2592 *
2593 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002594 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002595 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2596 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2597 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2598 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2599 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2600 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002601 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2602 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002603 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2604 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2605 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2606 *
2607 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2608 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2609 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2610 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2611 *
2612 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2613 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2614 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2615 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002616 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002617 * - a list of information element IDs
2618 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2619 *
2620 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2621 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2622 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2623 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2624 * vendor information elements.
2625 *
2626 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2627 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2628 *
2629 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2630 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2631 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2632 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2633 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2634 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2635 *
2636 *
2637 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2638 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2639 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2640 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2641 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2642 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2643 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2644 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2645 *
2646 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2647 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2648 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002649 */
2650
2651/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002652 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2653 *
2654 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2655 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2656 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2657 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2658 *
2659 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2660 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2661 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2662 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2663 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2664 * hardware flags.
2665 *
2666 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2667 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2668 * turned off otherwise.
2669 *
2670 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2671 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2672 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2673 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2674 */
2675
2676/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002677 * DOC: Frame filtering
2678 *
2679 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2680 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2681 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2682 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2683 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2684 *
2685 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2686 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2687 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2688 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002689 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2690 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2691 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2692 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2693 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2694 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2695 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002696 *
2697 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2698 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2699 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2700 * or dropped.
2701 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002702 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2703 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2704 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2705 * the flag, but not clear it.
2706 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2707 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2708 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2709 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2710 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2711 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2712 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2713 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002714 */
2715
2716/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002717 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2718 *
2719 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2720 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2721 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2722 *
2723 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2724 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2725 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2726 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2727 * the driver code.
2728 *
2729 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2730 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2731 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2732 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2733 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2734 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2735 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2736 *
2737 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2738 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2739 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2740 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2741 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2742 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2743 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2744 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2745 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2746 * @sta_notify callback.
2747 *
2748 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2749 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2750 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2751 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2752 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2753 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2754 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002755 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002756 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2757 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2758 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2759 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2760 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2761 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2762 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002763 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2764 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2765 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002766 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2767 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2768 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2769 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2770 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2771 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2772 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2773 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2774 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2775 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2776 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2777 *
2778 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2779 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2780 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2781 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2782 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2783 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2784 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2785 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2786 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2787 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002788 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002789 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2790 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2791 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2792 *
2793 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2794 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2795 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2796 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2797 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002798 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002799 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2800 *
2801 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2802 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2803 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2804 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002805 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002806 *
2807 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2808 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2809 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2810 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002811 */
2812
2813/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002814 * DOC: HW queue control
2815 *
2816 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2817 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2818 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2819 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2820 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2821 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2822 *
2823 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2824 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2825 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2826 *
2827 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2828 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2829 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2830 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2831 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2832 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2833 * the hardware queue.
2834 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2835 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2836 *
2837 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2838 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2839 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2840 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2841 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2842 *
2843 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2844 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2845 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2846 * off-channel queue: 9
2847 *
2848 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2849 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2850 *
2851 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2852 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2853 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2854 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2855 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2856 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2857 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2858 *
2859 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2860 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2861 *
2862 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2863 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2864 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2865 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2866 */
2867
2868/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002869 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2870 *
2871 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2872 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2873 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2874 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2875 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002876 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2877 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2878 * multicast address.
2879 *
2880 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2881 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2882 *
2883 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2884 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2885 *
2886 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2887 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2888 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2889 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2890 * honour this flag if possible.
2891 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002892 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2893 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002894 *
2895 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002896 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002897 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002898 *
2899 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002900 */
2901enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002902 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2903 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2904 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2905 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2906 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2907 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002908 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002909 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002910};
2911
2912/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002913 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2914 *
2915 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2916 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002917 *
2918 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2919 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002920 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002921 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2922 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002923 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2924 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2925 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002926 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002927 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2928 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2929 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2930 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2931 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2932 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2933 * session is gone and removes the station.
2934 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2935 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2936 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2937 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002938 */
2939enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2940 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2941 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002942 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002943 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2944 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2945 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002946 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002947};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002948
2949/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002950 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2951 *
2952 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2953 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2954 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2955 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2956 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2957 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2958 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2959 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2960 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2961 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2962 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2963 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2964 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2965 */
2966struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2967 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2968 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2969 u16 tid;
2970 u16 ssn;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002971 u16 buf_size;
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002972 bool amsdu;
2973 u16 timeout;
2974};
2975
2976/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002977 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2978 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002979 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2980 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002981 */
2982enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2983 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002984 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002985};
2986
2987/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002988 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2989 *
2990 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002991 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2992 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2993 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002994 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002995 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2996 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2997 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002998 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2999 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003000 */
3001enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3002 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3003 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02003004 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01003005 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003006};
3007
3008/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003009 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3010 *
3011 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3012 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3013 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3014 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3015 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3016 *
3017 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3018 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3019 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
3020 */
3021enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3022 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3023 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3024};
3025
3026/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003027 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3028 *
3029 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3030 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3031 *
3032 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3033 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3034 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3035 * of wowlan configuration)
3036 */
3037enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3038 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3039 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3040};
3041
3042/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003043 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3044 *
3045 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3046 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3047 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3048 *
3049 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3050 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3051 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02003052 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003053 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003054 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003055 *
3056 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3057 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3058 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3059 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3060 * or zero.
3061 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3062 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3063 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003064 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003065 *
3066 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3067 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3068 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3069 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04003070 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3071 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003072 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003073 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003074 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3075 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3076 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3077 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3078 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02003079 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3080 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3081 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3082 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003083 *
3084 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3085 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3086 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3087 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3088 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3089 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003090 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3091 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3092 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3093 * in suspend().
3094 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003095 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003096 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003097 * and @stop must be implemented.
3098 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3099 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3100 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3101 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3102 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003103 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003104 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003105 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3106 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3107 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3108 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3109 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3110 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003111 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3112 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3113 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3114 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3115 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3116 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3117 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003118 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003119 *
3120 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3121 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003122 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003123 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003124 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003125 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3126 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3127 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3128 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3129 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003130 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3131 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003132 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003133 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3134 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3135 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3136 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003137 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3138 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003139 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003140 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003141 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3142 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3143 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3144 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3145 * which flags are changed.
3146 * This callback can sleep.
3147 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003148 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003149 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003150 *
3151 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003152 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3153 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003154 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003155 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003156 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003157 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003158 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3159 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3160 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003161 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003162 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003163 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3164 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3165 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3166 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3167 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3168 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003169 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3170 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3171 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3172 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003173 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003174 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003175 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3176 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003177 * that power save is disabled.
3178 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3179 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3180 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3181 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3182 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3183 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3184 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003185 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003186 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003187 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3188 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3189 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3190 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3191 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3192 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3193 * The callback can sleep.
3194 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003195 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3196 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3197 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3198 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3199 *
3200 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003201 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003202 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003203 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3204 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003205 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3206 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3207 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003208 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003209 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3210 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3211 * this notification.
3212 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003213 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003214 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3215 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003216 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003217 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003218 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3219 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3220 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003221 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003222 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003223 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003224 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3225 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3226 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003227 * The callback can sleep.
3228 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003229 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003230 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003231 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003232 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3233 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3234 *
3235 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003236 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3237 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3238 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3239 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3240 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003241 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303242 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3243 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003244 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3245 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303246 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003247 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003248 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3249 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3250 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003251 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003252 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3253 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3254 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3255 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003256 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3257 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3258 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3259 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3260 * The callback can sleep.
3261 *
3262 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3263 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3264 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3265 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3266 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003267 * The callback can sleep.
3268 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003269 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3270 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3271 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3272 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3273 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3274 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3275 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003276 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3277 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3278 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003279 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003280 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3281 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3282 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3283 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3284 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3285 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3286 * The callback can sleep.
3287 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003288 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003289 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003290 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003291 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003292 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003293 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003294 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003295 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003296 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003297 *
3298 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003299 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003300 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003301 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003302 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003303 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3304 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3305 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3306 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3307 * The callback can sleep.
3308 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003309 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3310 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3311 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3312 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003313 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003314 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003315 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3316 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3317 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003318 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003319 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003320 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003321 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3322 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003323 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3324 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3325 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003326 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003327 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003328 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3329 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003330 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3331 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3332 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003333 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003334 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3335 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003336 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003337 *
3338 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003339 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3340 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3341 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3342 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003343 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003344 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003345 *
3346 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3347 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3348 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3349 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003350 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003351 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3352 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3353 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3354 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3355 *
3356 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003357 *
3358 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3359 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3360 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3361 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3362 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3363 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003364 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003365 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3366 * must be accepted in this case.
3367 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003368 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3369 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003370 *
3371 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3372 *
3373 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303374 *
3375 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3376 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303377 *
3378 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3379 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3380 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003381 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3382 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003383 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003384 *
3385 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3386 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3387 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3388 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003389 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003390 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3391 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3392 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3393 * more-data bit must always be set.
3394 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3395 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003396 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3397 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3398 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3399 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3400 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3401 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003402 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3403 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3404 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003405 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3406 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003407 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003408 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003409 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003410 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3411 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3412 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003413 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003414 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3415 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3416 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3417 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003418 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003419 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003420 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3421 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3422 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003423 *
3424 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3425 *
3426 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3427 *
3428 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3429 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3430 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003431 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3432 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3433 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3434 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3435 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3436 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3437 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3438 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3439 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02003440 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3441 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3442 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003443 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3444 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003445 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3446 * duration for which the operation is requested.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003447 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003448 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003449 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3450 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3451 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3452 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3453 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3454 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3455 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3456 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3457 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003458 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303459 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003460 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303461 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003462 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3463 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3464 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303465 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003466 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3467 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303468 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003469 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3470 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303471 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003472 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3473 * another, as specified in the list of
3474 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3475 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303476 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003477 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003478 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3479 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3480 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3481 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3482 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3483 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3484 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003485 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003486 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3487 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3488 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3489 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3490 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003491 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003492 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3493 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3494 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003495 *
3496 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3497 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3498 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003499 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003500 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3501 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003502 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003503 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003504 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3505 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003506 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3507 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003508 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003509 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003510 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3511 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3512 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003513 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003514 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3515 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3516 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3517 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003518 *
3519 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3520 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3521 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003522 *
3523 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3524 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003525 *
3526 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3527 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3528 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3529 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3530 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3531 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3532 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3533 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3534 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003535 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3536 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3537 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3538 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3539 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3540 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3541 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003542 *
3543 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003544 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3545 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3546 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3547 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003548 *
3549 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3550 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003551 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3552 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3553 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3554 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3555 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3556 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003557 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3558 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3559 * this call.
3560 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3561 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3562 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003563 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003564struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003565 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3566 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3567 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003568 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003569 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003570#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3571 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3572 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003573 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003574#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003575 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003576 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003577 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3578 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003579 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003580 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003581 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003582 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003583 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3584 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3585 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3586 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003587
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003588 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3589 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3590
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003591 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003592 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003593 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3594 unsigned int changed_flags,
3595 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003596 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003597 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3598 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3599 unsigned int filter_flags,
3600 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003601 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3602 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003603 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003604 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003605 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003606 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3608 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3609 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3610 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003611 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3612 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3613 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003614 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3615 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003616 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003617 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003618 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3619 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003620 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3621 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3622 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003623 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003624 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003625 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003626 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3628 const u8 *mac_addr);
3629 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003631 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3632 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003633 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3634 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3635 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003636 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003637 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003638 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3639 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3640 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3641 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303642#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3643 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3644 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3645 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3646 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303647#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003648 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003649 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003650 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3651 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3652 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3653 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003654 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3655 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3656 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003657 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3658 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3659 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3660 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003661 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3662 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3663 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003664 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3665 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3666 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3667 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003668 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003669 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003670 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003671 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3672 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3673 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003674 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3675 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003676 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003677 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003678
3679 /**
3680 * @ampdu_action:
3681 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3682 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3683 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3684 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3685 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3686 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3687 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3688 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3689 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3690 *
3691 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3692 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3693 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3694 *
3695 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3696 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3697 *
3698 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3699 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3700 * - ``TX: 81``
3701 *
3702 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3703 *
3704 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3705 * The callback can sleep.
3706 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003707 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003708 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003709 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003710 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3711 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003712 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003713 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003714#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003715 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3716 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003717 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3718 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3719 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003720#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003721 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3722 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003723 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003724 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003725 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003726 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3727 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003728
3729 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003730 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003731 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003732 int duration,
3733 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003734 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003735 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3736 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3737 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303738 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303739 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3740 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003741 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3742 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3743 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003744
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003745 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3746 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3747 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3748 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3749 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003750 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3751 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3752 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3753 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3754 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003755
3756 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3757 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3758 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3759 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3760 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3761 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3762 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3763 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003764
3765 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003766 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3767 u16 duration);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003768
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003769 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3770 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3771
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003772 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3773 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3774 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3775 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3776 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3777 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3778 u32 changed);
3779 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3780 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3781 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3782 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3783 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3784 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003785 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3786 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3787 int n_vifs,
3788 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003789
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003790 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3791 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003792
3793#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3794 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3796 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3797#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003798 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3799 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3800 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003801 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3802 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3803 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003804
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003805 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3806 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3807
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003808 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3809 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003810 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3811 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003812 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3813 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003814
3815 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3816 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3817 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3818 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003819 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003820 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3821 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3822 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003823 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3824 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3825 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003826
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01003827 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3828 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003829 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003830
3831 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3832 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3833 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3834 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3835 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003836 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3837 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3838 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003839 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3840 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3842 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3844 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003845};
3846
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003847/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003848 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3849 *
3850 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3851 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3852 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3853 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3854 * @priv_data_len.
3855 *
3856 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3857 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3858 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3859 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3860 *
3861 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3862 */
3863struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3864 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3865 const char *requested_name);
3866
3867/**
3868 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003869 *
3870 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3871 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3872 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3873 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3874 * @priv_data_len.
3875 *
3876 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3877 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003878 *
3879 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003880 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003881static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003882struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003883 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3884{
3885 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3886}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003887
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003888/**
3889 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3890 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003891 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3892 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3893 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003894 *
3895 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003896 *
3897 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003898 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003899int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3900
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003901/**
3902 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3903 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3904 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3905 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3906 */
3907struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3908 int throughput;
3909 int blink_time;
3910};
3911
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003912/**
3913 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3914 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3915 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3916 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3917 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3918 */
3919enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3920 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3921 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3922 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3923};
3924
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003925#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003926const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3927const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3928const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3929const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3930const char *
3931__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3932 unsigned int flags,
3933 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3934 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003935#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003936/**
3937 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3938 *
3939 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3940 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3941 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3942 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3943 *
3944 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003945 *
3946 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003947 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003948static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003949{
3950#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3951 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3952#else
3953 return NULL;
3954#endif
3955}
3956
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003957/**
3958 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3959 *
3960 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3961 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3962 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3963 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3964 *
3965 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003966 *
3967 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003968 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003969static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003970{
3971#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3972 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3973#else
3974 return NULL;
3975#endif
3976}
3977
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003978/**
3979 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3980 *
3981 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3982 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3983 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3984 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3985 *
3986 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003987 *
3988 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003989 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003990static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003991{
3992#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3993 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3994#else
3995 return NULL;
3996#endif
3997}
3998
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003999/**
4000 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4001 *
4002 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4003 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4004 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4005 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4006 *
4007 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004008 *
4009 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004010 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004011static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004012{
4013#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4014 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4015#else
4016 return NULL;
4017#endif
4018}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02004019
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004020/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004021 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4022 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004023 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004024 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4025 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4026 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004027 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4028 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4029 *
4030 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004031 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004032static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004033ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004034 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4035 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4036{
4037#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004038 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004039 blink_table_len);
4040#else
4041 return NULL;
4042#endif
4043}
4044
4045/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004046 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4047 *
4048 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4049 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4050 *
4051 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4052 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004053void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4054
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004055/**
4056 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4057 *
4058 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4059 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004060 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004061 *
4062 * @hw: the hardware to free
4063 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004064void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4065
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02004066/**
4067 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4068 *
4069 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4070 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4071 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4072 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4073 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4074 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4075 *
4076 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4077 */
4078void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4079
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01004080/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004081 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004082 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004083 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4084 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4085 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4086 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4087 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4088 *
4089 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4090 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4091 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4092 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4093 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4094 *
4095 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4096 *
4097 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004098 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004099 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4100 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004101 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004102void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4103 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004104
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004105/**
4106 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4107 *
4108 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004109 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4110 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4111 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4112 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004113 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004114 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004115 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4116 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004117 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4118 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004119 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004120 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004121 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004122 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4123 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004124 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004125static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4126{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004127 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004128}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004129
4130/**
4131 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4132 *
4133 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004134 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4135 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004136 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004137 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4138 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004139 *
4140 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4141 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004142 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004143void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004144
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004145/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004146 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4147 *
4148 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4149 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4150 *
4151 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004152 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4153 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004154 *
4155 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4156 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4157 */
4158static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4159 struct sk_buff *skb)
4160{
4161 local_bh_disable();
4162 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4163 local_bh_enable();
4164}
4165
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004166/**
4167 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4168 *
4169 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4170 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4171 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4172 *
4173 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4174 *
4175 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4176 * each other.
4177 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004178 * @sta: currently connected sta
4179 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004180 *
4181 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004182 */
4183int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4184
4185/**
4186 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4187 * (in process context)
4188 *
4189 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4190 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4191 * applies.
4192 *
4193 * @sta: currently connected sta
4194 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004195 *
4196 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004197 */
4198static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4199 bool start)
4200{
4201 int ret;
4202
4203 local_bh_disable();
4204 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4205 local_bh_enable();
4206
4207 return ret;
4208}
4209
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004210/**
4211 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4212 * @sta: currently connected station
4213 *
4214 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4215 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4216 * connected station was received.
4217 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4218 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4219 * be serialized.
4220 */
4221void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4222
4223/**
4224 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4225 * @sta: currently connected station
4226 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4227 *
4228 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4229 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4230 * from a connected station was received.
4231 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4232 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4233 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004234 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4235 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4236 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4237 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004238 */
4239void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4240
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004241/*
4242 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4243 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4244 */
Felix Fietkau651b9922018-02-10 13:20:34 +01004245#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004246
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004247/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004248 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004249 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004250 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4251 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004252 *
4253 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004254 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4255 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004256 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004257 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4258 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4259 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4260 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4261 *
4262 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4263 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4264 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4265 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4266 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4267 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4268 *
4269 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4270 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4271 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4272 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4273 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004274 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004275void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4276 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004277
4278/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004279 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4280 *
4281 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4282 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4283 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4284 *
4285 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4286 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4287 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4288 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4289 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4290 */
4291void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4292 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4293 struct sk_buff *skb,
4294 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4295 int max_rates);
4296
4297/**
Toke Høiland-Jørgensen484a54c2017-04-06 11:38:26 +02004298 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4299 *
4300 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4301 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4302 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4303 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4304 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4305 * slow stations to starve).
4306 *
4307 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4308 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4309 */
4310void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4311 u32 thr);
4312
4313/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004314 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4315 *
4316 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4317 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4318 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4319 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004320 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4321 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004322 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004323 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4324 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004325 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004326 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4327 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004328 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004329void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004330 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004331
4332/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004333 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4334 *
4335 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4336 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4337 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4338 *
4339 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4340 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4341 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4342 *
4343 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4344 * @status: tx status information
4345 */
4346void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4347 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4348
4349/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004350 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4351 *
4352 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4353 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4354 * specific skbs.
4355 *
4356 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4357 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4358 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4359 *
4360 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4361 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4362 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4363 * @info: tx status information
4364 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004365static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4366 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4367 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4368{
4369 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4370 .sta = sta,
4371 .info = info,
4372 };
4373
4374 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4375}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004376
4377/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004378 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4379 *
4380 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4381 *
4382 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4383 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4384 * for a single hardware.
4385 *
4386 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4387 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4388 */
4389static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 struct sk_buff *skb)
4391{
4392 local_bh_disable();
4393 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4394 local_bh_enable();
4395}
4396
4397/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004398 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004399 *
4400 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4401 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4402 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004403 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4404 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004405 *
4406 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4407 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004408 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004409void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004410 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004411
4412/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004413 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4414 *
4415 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4416 * connected STA.
4417 *
4418 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4419 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4420 */
4421void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4422
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004423#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4424
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004425/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004426 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4427 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4428 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004429 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4430 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4431 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004432 */
4433struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4434 u16 tim_offset;
4435 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004436
4437 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004438};
4439
4440/**
4441 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4442 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4443 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4444 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4445 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4446 *
4447 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4448 * obtain the beacon template.
4449 *
4450 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4451 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004452 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4453 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004454 *
4455 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4456 *
4457 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4458 */
4459struct sk_buff *
4460ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4461 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4462 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4463
4464/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004465 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4466 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004467 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004468 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4469 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4470 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4471 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4472 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4473 *
4474 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004475 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004476 *
4477 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4478 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004479 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4480 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004481 *
4482 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004483 *
4484 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004485 */
4486struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4488 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4489
4490/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004491 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4492 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004493 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004494 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004495 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004496 *
4497 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004498 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004499static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4501{
4502 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4503}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004504
4505/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004506 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4507 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4508 *
4509 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4510 * This function is called implicitly when
4511 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4512 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4513 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4514 *
4515 * Return: new csa counter value
4516 */
4517u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4518
4519/**
Gregory Greenman03737002018-04-20 13:49:24 +03004520 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4521 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4522 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4523 *
4524 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4525 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4526 *
4527 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4528 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4529 */
4530void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4531
4532/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004533 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4534 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4535 *
4536 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004537 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004538 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4539 */
4540void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4541
4542/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004543 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004544 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4545 *
4546 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4547 */
4548bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4549
4550
4551/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004552 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4553 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4554 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4555 *
4556 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4557 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4558 *
4559 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004560 *
4561 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004562 */
4563struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4564 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4565
4566/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004567 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4568 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4569 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4570 *
4571 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4572 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4573 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4574 *
4575 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4576 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004577 *
4578 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004579 */
4580struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4581 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4582
4583/**
4584 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4585 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4586 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004587 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4588 * if at all possible
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004589 *
4590 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4591 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4592 * BSSID and address is used.
4593 *
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004594 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4595 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4596 *
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004597 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4598 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004599 *
4600 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004601 */
4602struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004603 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4604 bool qos_ok);
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004605
4606/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004607 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4608 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004609 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004610 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4611 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004612 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004613 *
4614 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4615 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004616 *
4617 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004618 */
4619struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004620 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004621 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004622 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004623
4624/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004625 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4626 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004627 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004628 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4629 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004630 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004631 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4632 *
4633 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4634 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4635 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4636 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4637 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004638void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004639 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004640 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004641 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4642
4643/**
4644 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4645 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004646 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004647 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004648 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004649 *
4650 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4651 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4652 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004653 *
4654 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004655 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004656__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4657 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004658 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004659
4660/**
4661 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4662 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004663 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004664 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4665 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004666 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004667 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4668 *
4669 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4670 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4671 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4672 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4673 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004674void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4675 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004676 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004677 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004678 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4679
4680/**
4681 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4682 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004683 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004684 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004685 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004686 *
4687 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4688 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4689 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004690 *
4691 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004692 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004693__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4694 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004695 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004696 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004697
4698/**
4699 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4700 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004701 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004702 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004703 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004704 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004705 *
4706 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4707 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004708 *
4709 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004710 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004711__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004713 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004714 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004715 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004716
4717/**
4718 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4719 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004720 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004721 *
4722 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4723 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4724 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4725 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004726 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4727 *
4728 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4729 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004730 *
4731 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4732 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4733 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4734 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4735 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4736 * use common code for all beacons.
4737 */
4738struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004739ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004740
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004741/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004742 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4743 *
4744 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4745 *
4746 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4747 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4748 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4749 */
4750void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4751 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4752
4753/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004754 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004755 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004756 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4757 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004758 *
4759 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004760 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4761 * with this P1K
4762 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004763 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004764static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4765 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4766{
4767 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4768 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4769 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4770
4771 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4772}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004773
4774/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004775 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4776 *
4777 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4778 * and transmitter address.
4779 *
4780 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4781 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4782 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4783 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4784 */
4785void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4786 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4787
4788/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004789 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4790 *
4791 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4792 * in the packet.
4793 *
4794 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4795 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4796 * encrypted with this key
4797 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4798 */
4799void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4800 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004801
4802/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004803 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4804 *
4805 * @pos: start of crypto header
4806 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4807 * @pn: PN to add
4808 *
4809 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4810 * the packet payload)
4811 *
4812 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4813 * point to the crypto header)
4814 */
4815u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4816
4817/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004818 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4819 *
4820 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004821 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004822 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4823 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4824 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4825 *
4826 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4827 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4828 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4829 *
4830 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4831 * can be done concurrently.
4832 */
4833void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4834 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4835
4836/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004837 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4838 *
4839 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004840 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004841 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4842 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4843 * @seq: new sequence data
4844 *
4845 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4846 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4847 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4848 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4849 *
4850 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4851 * can be done concurrently.
4852 */
4853void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4854 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4855
4856/**
4857 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4858 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4859 *
4860 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4861 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4862 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4863 *
4864 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4865 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4866 */
4867void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4868
4869/**
4870 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4871 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4872 * @keyconf: new key data
4873 *
4874 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4875 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4876 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4877 *
4878 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4879 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4880 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4881 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4882 *
4883 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4884 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4885 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4886 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4887 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4888 * of the reconfiguration.
4889 *
4890 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4891 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4892 *
4893 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4894 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4895 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4896 * the key that's being replaced.
4897 */
4898struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4899ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4900 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4901
4902/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004903 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4904 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4905 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4906 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4907 * @gfp: allocation flags
4908 */
4909void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4910 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4911
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004912/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004913 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4914 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4915 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4916 *
4917 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4918 */
4919void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4920
4921/**
4922 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4923 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4924 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4925 *
4926 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4927 */
4928void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4929
4930/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004931 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4932 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4933 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4934 *
4935 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004936 *
4937 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004938 */
4939
4940int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4941
4942/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004943 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4944 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4945 *
4946 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4947 */
4948void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4949
4950/**
4951 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4952 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4953 *
4954 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4955 */
4956void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4957
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004958/**
4959 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4960 *
4961 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4962 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004963 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4964 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004965 *
4966 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004967 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004968 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004969void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4970 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004971
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004972/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004973 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4974 *
4975 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4976 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4977 *
4978 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4979 */
4980void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4981
4982/**
4983 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4984 *
4985 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4986 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4987 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4988 * while associating, for instance.
4989 *
4990 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4991 */
4992void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4993
4994/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004995 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4996 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4997 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4998 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4999 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5000 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5001 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5002 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005003 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005004 */
5005enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5006 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5007 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005008 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005009};
5010
5011/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005012 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5013 *
5014 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5015 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5016 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5017 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5018 *
5019 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5020 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5021 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5022 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5023 */
5024void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5025 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5027 void *data);
5028
5029/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07005030 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005031 *
5032 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5033 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005034 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5035 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5036 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005037 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005038 *
5039 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005040 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005041 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005042 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5043 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005044static inline void
5045ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5046 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5048 void *data)
5049{
5050 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5051 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5052 iterator, data);
5053}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005054
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005055/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005056 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5057 *
5058 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5059 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5060 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5061 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005062 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005063 *
5064 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005065 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005066 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5067 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5068 */
5069void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005070 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005071 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5072 u8 *mac,
5073 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5074 void *data);
5075
5076/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02005077 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5078 *
5079 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5080 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5081 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5082 *
5083 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5084 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5085 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5086 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5087 */
5088void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5089 u32 iter_flags,
5090 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5091 u8 *mac,
5092 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5093 void *data);
5094
5095/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03005096 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5097 *
5098 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5099 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5100 * function for them.
5101 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5102 *
5103 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5104 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5105 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5106 */
5107void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5108 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5109 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5110 void *data);
5111/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04005112 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5113 *
5114 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5115 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5116 *
5117 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5118 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5119 */
5120void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5121
5122/**
5123 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5124 *
5125 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5126 * workqueue.
5127 *
5128 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5129 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5130 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5131 */
5132void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5133 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5134 unsigned long delay);
5135
5136/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005137 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005138 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005139 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305140 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005141 *
5142 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005143 *
5144 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5145 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5146 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5147 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305148int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5149 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005150
5151/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005152 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005153 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005154 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5155 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5156 *
5157 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005158 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5159 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005160 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005161void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005162 u16 tid);
5163
5164/**
5165 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005166 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005167 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005168 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005169 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005170 *
5171 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5172 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5173 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5174 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005175int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005176
5177/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005178 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005179 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005180 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5181 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5182 *
5183 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005184 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5185 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005186 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005187void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005188 u16 tid);
5189
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005190/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005191 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5192 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005193 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005194 * @addr: station's address
5195 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005196 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5197 *
5198 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005199 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5200 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005201struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005202 const u8 *addr);
5203
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005204/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005205 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005206 *
5207 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005208 * @addr: remote station's address
5209 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005210 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005211 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5212 *
5213 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005214 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5215 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005216 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5217 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5218 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5219 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5220 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5221 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5222 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005223 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005224 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005225 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005226struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5227 const u8 *addr,
5228 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005229
5230/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005231 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5232 * @hw: the hardware
5233 * @pubsta: the station
5234 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5235 *
5236 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5237 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5238 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5239 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5240 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5241 *
5242 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5243 * manner.
5244 *
5245 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5246 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5247 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5248 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5249 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5250 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5251 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5252 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5253 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5254 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5255 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5256 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5257 * woke up while blocked or not.
5258 */
5259void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5260 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5261
5262/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005263 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5264 * @pubsta: the station
5265 *
5266 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5267 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5268 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5269 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5270 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005271 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5272 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5273 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5274 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5275 *
5276 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5277 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5278 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5279 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005280 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005281void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005282
5283/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005284 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5285 * @pubsta: the station
5286 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5287 *
5288 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5289 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5290 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5291 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5292 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5293 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5294 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5295 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5296 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5297 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5298 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5299 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5300 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5301 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5302 */
5303void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5304
5305/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005306 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5307 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5308 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5309 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5310 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5311 *
5312 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5313 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5314 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5315 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5316 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5317 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005318 *
5319 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5320 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5321 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005322 */
5323void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5324 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5325 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5326 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5327 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5328 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5329 void *data),
5330 void *iter_data);
5331
5332/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005333 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5334 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5335 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5336 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5337 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5338 *
5339 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5340 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5341 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5342 * in removal process will be skipped.
5343 *
5344 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5345 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5346 */
5347void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5348 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5349 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5351 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5352 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5353 void *data),
5354 void *iter_data);
5355
5356/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005357 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5358 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5359 * @iter: iterator function
5360 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5361 *
5362 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5363 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5364 * places while calling into the driver.
5365 *
5366 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5367 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5368 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005369 *
5370 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5371 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5372 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5373 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005374 */
5375void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5376 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5377 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5378 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5379 void *data),
5380 void *iter_data);
5381
5382/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005383 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5384 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5385 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5386 *
5387 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5388 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5389 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5390 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5391 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005392 * %NULL.
5393 *
5394 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005395 */
5396struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5397 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5398
5399/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005400 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5401 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005402 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005403 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005404 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005405 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005406 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5407 */
5408void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005409
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005410/**
5411 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5412 *
5413 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5414 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005415 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005416 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5417 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005418 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5419 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005420 *
5421 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5422 * without connection recovery attempts.
5423 */
5424void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5425
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005426/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005427 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5428 *
5429 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5430 *
5431 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5432 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5433 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5434 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5435 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5436 *
5437 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5438 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5439 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5440 * disconnect normally later.
5441 *
5442 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5443 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5444 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5445 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5446 */
5447void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5448
5449/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005450 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5451 * rssi threshold triggered
5452 *
5453 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5454 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005455 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005456 * @gfp: context flags
5457 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005458 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005459 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5460 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5461 */
5462void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5463 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005464 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005465 gfp_t gfp);
5466
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005467/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005468 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5469 *
5470 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5471 * @gfp: context flags
5472 */
5473void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5474
5475/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005476 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5477 *
5478 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5479 */
5480void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5481
5482/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005483 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5484 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5485 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5486 *
5487 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5488 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5489 */
5490void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5491
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005492/**
5493 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5494 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005495 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005496 *
5497 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5498 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5499 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5500 */
5501void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5502 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5503
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005504/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005505 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5506 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5507 */
5508void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5509
5510/**
5511 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5512 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5513 */
5514void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5515
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005516/**
5517 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5518 *
5519 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5520 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5521 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5522 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5523 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5524 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5525 *
5526 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5527 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5528 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5529 */
5530void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5531 const u8 *addr);
5532
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005533/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005534 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5535 * @pubsta: station struct
5536 * @tid: the session's TID
5537 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5538 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5539 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5540 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5541 *
5542 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5543 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5544 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5545 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5546 */
5547void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5548 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5549 u16 received_mpdus);
5550
5551/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005552 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5553 *
5554 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5555 * buffer.
5556 *
5557 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5558 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5559 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5560 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5561 */
5562void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5563
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005564/**
5565 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5566 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5567 * @addr: station mac address
5568 * @tid: the rx tid
5569 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005570void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005571 unsigned int tid);
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005572
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005573/**
5574 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5575 *
5576 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5577 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5578 * reordering.
5579 *
5580 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5581 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5582 *
5583 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5584 * @addr: station mac address
5585 * @tid: the rx tid
5586 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005587static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5588 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5589{
5590 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5591 return;
5592 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5593}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005594
5595/**
5596 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5597 *
5598 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5599 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5600 * reordering.
5601 *
5602 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5603 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5604 *
5605 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5606 * @addr: station mac address
5607 * @tid: the rx tid
5608 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005609static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5610 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5611{
5612 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5613 return;
5614 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5615}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005616
Naftali Goldstein04c2cf32017-07-11 10:07:25 +03005617/**
5618 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5619 *
5620 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5621 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5622 *
5623 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5624 *
5625 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5626 * @addr: station mac address
5627 * @tid: the rx tid
5628 */
5629void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5630 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5631
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005632/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005633
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005634/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005635 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005636 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005637 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5638 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5639 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005640 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5641 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005642 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5643 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5644 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5645 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5646 * RTS threshold
5647 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5648 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005649 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005650 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005651 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005652 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005653struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5654 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5655 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5656 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5657 struct sk_buff *skb;
5658 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5659 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005660 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005661 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005662 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005663};
5664
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03005665/**
5666 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5667 */
5668enum rate_control_capabilities {
5669 /**
5670 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5671 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5672 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5673 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5674 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5675 */
5676 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5677};
5678
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005679struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03005680 unsigned long capa;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005681 const char *name;
5682 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005683 void (*free)(void *priv);
5684
5685 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5686 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005687 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005688 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305689 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005690 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005691 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5692 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005693 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5694 void *priv_sta);
5695
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005696 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5697 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5698 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005699 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5700 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5701 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005702 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5703 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005704
5705 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5706 struct dentry *dir);
5707 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005708
5709 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005710};
5711
5712static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005713 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005714 int index)
5715{
5716 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5717}
5718
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005719/**
5720 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5721 *
5722 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5723 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5724 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5725 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5726 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5727 * not null.
5728 *
5729 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5730 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5731 *
5732 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5733 * that this may be null.
5734 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5735 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5736 */
5737bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5738 void *priv_sta,
5739 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5740
5741
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005742static inline s8
5743rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5744 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5745{
5746 int i;
5747
5748 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5749 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5750 return i;
5751
5752 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005753 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005754
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005755 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005756 return 0;
5757}
5758
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005759static inline
5760bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5761 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5762{
5763 unsigned int i;
5764
5765 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5766 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5767 return true;
5768 return false;
5769}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005770
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005771/**
5772 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5773 *
5774 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5775 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5776 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5777 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5778 *
5779 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5780 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5781 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5782 */
5783int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5784 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5785 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5786
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005787int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5788void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005789
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005790static inline bool
5791conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5792{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005793 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005794}
5795
5796static inline bool
5797conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5798{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005799 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5800 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005801}
5802
5803static inline bool
5804conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5805{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005806 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5807 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005808}
5809
5810static inline bool
5811conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5812{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005813 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005814}
5815
5816static inline bool
5817conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5818{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005819 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5820 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5821 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005822}
5823
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005824static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5825ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5826{
5827 if (p2p) {
5828 switch (type) {
5829 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5830 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5831 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5832 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5833 default:
5834 break;
5835 }
5836 }
5837 return type;
5838}
5839
5840static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5841ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5842{
5843 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5844}
5845
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005846/**
5847 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5848 *
5849 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5850 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5851 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5852 *
5853 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5854 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5855 * matching GroupId management frame.
5856 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5857 */
5858void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5859 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5860
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005861void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5862 int rssi_min_thold,
5863 int rssi_max_thold);
5864
5865void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005866
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005867/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005868 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005869 *
5870 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5871 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005872 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5873 *
5874 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5875 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005876 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005877int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5878
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005879/**
5880 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5881 * @vif: virtual interface
5882 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5883 * @gfp: allocation flags
5884 *
5885 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5886 */
5887void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5888 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5889 gfp_t gfp);
5890
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005891/**
5892 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5893 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5894 * @vif: virtual interface
5895 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5896 * @band: the band to transmit on
5897 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5898 *
5899 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5900 */
5901bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5902 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5903 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5904
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005905/**
5906 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5907 *
5908 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5909 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5910 *
5911 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5912 *
5913 * private:
5914 *
5915 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5916 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5917 */
5918struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5919 u32 next_tsf;
5920 bool has_next_tsf;
5921
5922 u8 absent;
5923
5924 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5925 struct {
5926 u32 start;
5927 u32 duration;
5928 u32 interval;
5929 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5930};
5931
5932/**
5933 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5934 *
5935 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5936 * @data: NoA tracking data
5937 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5938 *
5939 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5940 */
5941int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5942 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5943
5944/**
5945 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5946 *
5947 * @data: NoA tracking data
5948 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5949 */
5950void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5951
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005952/**
5953 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5954 * @vif: virtual interface
5955 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5956 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5957 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5958 * @gfp: allocation flags
5959 *
5960 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5961 */
5962void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5963 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5964 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005965
5966/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005967 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5968 *
5969 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5970 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5971 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5972 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5973 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5974 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5975 *
5976 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5977 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5978 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5979 *
5980 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5981 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5982 *
5983 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5984 */
5985int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5986
5987/**
5988 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5989 *
5990 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5991 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5992 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5993 *
5994 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5995 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5996 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5997 *
5998 * @sta: the station
5999 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6000 */
6001void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6002
6003/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01006004 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6005 *
6006 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01006007 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01006008 *
6009 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6010 */
6011struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6012 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01006013
6014/**
6015 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6016 *
6017 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6018 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6019 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6020 *
6021 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6022 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6023 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6024 */
6025void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6026 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6027 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03006028
6029/**
6030 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6031 *
6032 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6033 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6034 *
6035 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6036 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6037 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6038 * @gfp: allocation flags
6039 */
6040void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6041 u8 inst_id,
6042 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6043 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03006044
6045/**
6046 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6047 *
6048 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6049 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6050 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6051 *
6052 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6053 * @match: match event information
6054 * @gfp: allocation flags
6055 */
6056void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6057 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6058 gfp_t gfp);
6059
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07006060#endif /* MAC80211_H */